for domain administrators of distributors - email …4.2.3.4 create your outgoing email promotional...

49
April 14 2014 Mail Control Center For Domain Administrators of Distributors Version 2.5.5 Client Services

Upload: others

Post on 25-Jul-2020

7 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

April 14 2014

Mail Control Center For Domain Administrators of Distributors Version 255 Client Services

Table of Contents

copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 2 -

Mail Control Center 1

1 Preface 4

11 Intended audience 4

12 Overview 4

2 The Control Center 4

21 Accessing the Control Center 4 22 Control Center Login Credentials 5

23 Control Center Password 5

3 The Home Page 5

4 Customization 6

41 Customize with Themes 6 42 Advance Customization 6

421 Template 6 422 Colors amp Fonts 7 423 Text amp Links 9 424 Images amp Backgrounds 14 425 Rotating Banner Ad 18 426 Sign up Link 19 427 Default Web Mail Preferences 19 428 Report Spam 19 429 Quota Warning Letter 20 4210 Welcome Letter 21 4211 Calendar 22 4212 Navigation Buttons 22

43 Email Rules 23 431 SpamShield Score 23 432 Email Rules 24 433 ApprovedBlocked Senders 26 434 ApprovedBlocked Networks 27 435 Order of Rules 27

5 Manage Users 29

51 List User Accounts 29 511 To search under first name last name or login name 30 512 To search using the shortcut menu 30 513 Manage User Accounts Results 30 514 Search user accounts 31 515 Edit a user account 31 516 Change a user password 31 517 Delete a user 31 518 Suspend a user 31 519 Un-suspend a user 32 5110 Restricted User 32 5111 Restoring Deleted User 32 5112 Blocked User 33

52 Create Users 38 521 To create a single user account 38 522 Batch Process 38

53 Recover users 38

54 Send Email to all users 39 55 Manage Email Aliases 40

Table of Contents

copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -

551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41

56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41

57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42

58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43

59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44

510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46

511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47

512 Reserve Login Name 47

6 Account Summary 47

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47

71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48

72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48

73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48

74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -

1 Preface

11 Intended audience

This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service

12 Overview

This document is divided into the following sections

The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify

accounts on a specific domain

The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and

feel of your Web Mail and email service

Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts

Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service

2 The Control Center

The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information

21 Accessing the Control Center

The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control

Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -

22 Control Center Login Credentials

The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you

access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)

If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information

23 Control Center Password

The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated

password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center

3 The Home Page

The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 2: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Table of Contents

copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 2 -

Mail Control Center 1

1 Preface 4

11 Intended audience 4

12 Overview 4

2 The Control Center 4

21 Accessing the Control Center 4 22 Control Center Login Credentials 5

23 Control Center Password 5

3 The Home Page 5

4 Customization 6

41 Customize with Themes 6 42 Advance Customization 6

421 Template 6 422 Colors amp Fonts 7 423 Text amp Links 9 424 Images amp Backgrounds 14 425 Rotating Banner Ad 18 426 Sign up Link 19 427 Default Web Mail Preferences 19 428 Report Spam 19 429 Quota Warning Letter 20 4210 Welcome Letter 21 4211 Calendar 22 4212 Navigation Buttons 22

43 Email Rules 23 431 SpamShield Score 23 432 Email Rules 24 433 ApprovedBlocked Senders 26 434 ApprovedBlocked Networks 27 435 Order of Rules 27

5 Manage Users 29

51 List User Accounts 29 511 To search under first name last name or login name 30 512 To search using the shortcut menu 30 513 Manage User Accounts Results 30 514 Search user accounts 31 515 Edit a user account 31 516 Change a user password 31 517 Delete a user 31 518 Suspend a user 31 519 Un-suspend a user 32 5110 Restricted User 32 5111 Restoring Deleted User 32 5112 Blocked User 33

52 Create Users 38 521 To create a single user account 38 522 Batch Process 38

53 Recover users 38

54 Send Email to all users 39 55 Manage Email Aliases 40

Table of Contents

copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -

551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41

56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41

57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42

58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43

59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44

510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46

511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47

512 Reserve Login Name 47

6 Account Summary 47

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47

71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48

72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48

73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48

74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -

1 Preface

11 Intended audience

This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service

12 Overview

This document is divided into the following sections

The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify

accounts on a specific domain

The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and

feel of your Web Mail and email service

Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts

Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service

2 The Control Center

The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information

21 Accessing the Control Center

The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control

Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -

22 Control Center Login Credentials

The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you

access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)

If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information

23 Control Center Password

The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated

password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center

3 The Home Page

The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 3: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Table of Contents

copy 2008 Mail Control Center - 3 -

551 Create a New Email Alias 40 552 ListEditDelete Aliases 40 553 Alias Administrator Email Address 41

56 Require use of SSL 41 561 To enable SSL as required 41

57 Expire User Passwords 41 571 Expire User Passwords 42 572 Expire Users Passwords Now 42 573 To change expired passwords 42

58 Batch Process Accounts 43 581 Import 43 582 Update Passwords 43 583 Deleting Users 43 584 Do not encrtyp passwords 43

59 Calender sharing management tool one_sync 44 591 Using one_sync 44 592 Control Center function 44

510 Mobile device service one_mobile 44 5101 Functionality 44 5102 Control Center function 45 5103 Server Name 46

511 User Alerts 46 5111 Seting the Alert 46 5112 Disabling the alert 47 5113 Notify more than one person 47

512 Reserve Login Name 47

6 Account Summary 47

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support 47

71 Support 48 711 On-line Information 48 712 Contacting Support 48

72 Increasing the storage capacity 48 721 Domain level 48 722 User level 48

73 Changing the Web Mail Address 48 731 Initial Set-up 48 732 Mistake made 48

74 Changing Email Address 49 75 Batch Process Accounts 49

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -

1 Preface

11 Intended audience

This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service

12 Overview

This document is divided into the following sections

The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify

accounts on a specific domain

The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and

feel of your Web Mail and email service

Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts

Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service

2 The Control Center

The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information

21 Accessing the Control Center

The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control

Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -

22 Control Center Login Credentials

The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you

access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)

If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information

23 Control Center Password

The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated

password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center

3 The Home Page

The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 4: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 4 -

1 Preface

11 Intended audience

This document is intended to provide a reference guide for administrators managing the email service

12 Overview

This document is divided into the following sections

The Mail Control Center ndash A brief over view on the portal which allows you to create and modify

accounts on a specific domain

The Home page ndash The main page of the Mail Control Center with links to customize the look and

feel of your Web Mail and email service

Manage Users ndash Create modify and manage your email accounts

Account Summary ndash This section is reserved for the providers of the email service

2 The Control Center

The Control Center allows you to adddelete mailboxes and customize the look and feel of your email service pages You may also easily upgrade your email service or update your current contactbilling information

21 Accessing the Control Center

The Mail Control Center can be accessed by going to httpmailcontrolcentercom To log into your Control

Center you will need your Client ID this is your account number and password

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -

22 Control Center Login Credentials

The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you

access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)

If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information

23 Control Center Password

The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated

password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center

3 The Home Page

The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 5: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 5 -

22 Control Center Login Credentials

The Login ID is the account number which identifies your service This is a unique ID which allows you

access to manage the email service The Login ID starts with the letter c (eg c123456)

If you have forgotten your Mail Control Center password please contact support for this information

23 Control Center Password

The password needs to be assigned If you did not specify one during the creation an auto-generated

password was used You can reset the access password through the Distributor Control Center

3 The Home Page

The Home page of the Mail Control Center contains important information and links to the services and features available for your account You will find your Web Mail URL and email address information The top and side navigation menu allows you easily switch between sections

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 6: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 6 -

4 Customization

Easily tailor the look and feel of your email service using the Themes or Advanced Customization features

found under the Manage Services gt Customization section

Note If the service provider established any settings at the distributor level changes made at the control

center level will override that particular setting If no changes are made at the control center level each new

domain will inherit the settings created by the distributor

41 Customize with Themes

Conveniently customize your Classic Web Mail interface using one of many professionally designed themes

To select a Theme (Please note when applying one of the themes to your service any changes made to

the interface with Advanced Customization will be lost)

1 Select a theme by marking the radio button below the desired theme

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

42 Advance Customization

You can fully customize your email service interface using our features available under Advanced Customization Any service with a red asterisk () indicates that the service is for the Classic web interface

421 Template

There are several layouts you can choose for Web Mail These templates include the email service and

email service login pages

To select a Template for Classic Web Mail

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

To select a Template for the Web Mail login page

1 Select a template by marking the radio button below the desired login page template

2 Click on Preview to view the changes (Please note that selecting Preview will override any

customizations you have made)

3 Click on Finish when done

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 7: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 7 -

422 Colors amp Fonts

Easily customize the colors and fonts for your Classic Web Mail pages This feature will allow you to select

the default colors and fonts for the Classic Web Mail interface only

4221 Select a Font Setting

To select a font setting

1 Select the Font Style from the drop down menu

2 Select the Font Size the default size is 10pt

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 8: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 8 -

3 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or selecting a color from the

palette

4 Click Submit to save your changes

4222 Selecting Colors for Text Links and Navigations Bars

The Link Color contains three different settings link color visited link color and active link color All which

can be customized to be the same or different color

To change text links and navigation bar colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

4223 Selecting Bar and Bar Font Colors

Here you can change the bar and bar font colors for both the primary and secondary bars

To change primary and secondary bar and font colors

1 Select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from the palette

2 Click Submit to save your changes

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 9: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 9 -

423 Text amp Links

Customize the text and links for your Web Mail pages in the Text amp Links section

Here you can modify create and edit the default settings for your clients When you create a new account

the domain will have these default settings which can be individually modified in their Control Center

4231 Enter your site name

The site name will appear on the service pages for the accounts These pages include the Web Mail login

and Logout page

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 10: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 10 -

4232 Enter the page title

The text you enter here will be displayed in the browser title bar

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 11: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 11 -

4233 Enter the address your services will link back to

The logo and any Home links will link to a web address (URL) you enter here Your users will be taken to

this URL when they click on these links

4234 Create your outgoing email promotional signature

You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to all outgoing email messages sent

by your end users Please keep in mind that HTML is not allowed

Unfortunately this feature is not available in the Private Label Service

4235 Create your login page message

You can create a message that will appear on the login page Please keep in mind that basic HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 12: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 12 -

4236 Create your welcome page message

You can create a message that will be displayed on your welcome page Please keep in mind that HTML is

allowed

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail This is

highlighted by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 13: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 13 -

4237 Create your copyright message

You can create a copyright message that is displayed at the bottom of all pages in Web Mail HTML is

allowed Please keep in mind that the Rich Web Mail interface will enforce on line of text as the maximum

height

Below you will find a screen shot of the area where the site name is displayed in Web Mail by the arrow

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 14: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 14 -

4238 Help Link

The help link in web mail can be adjusted here

1 The default is to link to an Everyonenet page with some information 2 The second option is to create your own page and specify where this points to via an HTTP link 3 The last option is to not have a help link

424 Images amp Backgrounds

In this section you can specify the logos and customize the background for Web Mail You can also upload background stationery that end users can choose from to enhance their email messages

4241 Display your logo

This Logo appears on the pages of your DCC and in the consequent Mail Control Center

for all domains

4242 Display your login logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 15: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 15 -

When you upload your large logo this will appear at the top of the email login page and at the top of the four frame email templates Please keep in mind that it must be a GIF image no larger than 450 X 105 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

This is where the logo will appear in web mail

4243 Large logo background color

If your large logo is smaller than 450 x 105 pixels or has a transparent background you can select a large

logo background color You can select the Font Color by either entering the hexadecimal color code or

selecting a color from the palette This background color will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

4244 Display your Classic Interface logo

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 16: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 16 -

You can upload a small logo on the top left corner of your service pages This must be a GIF image no

larger than 100 X 100 (width X height) pixels This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic

Web Mail interface

Below you will find a screen shot of the Distributor Control Center and the area where the small logo is

displayed in Web Mail

4245 Customize the Classic interface background

You can create and upload a GIF image that would become the background for Web Mail You can also

select a background color instead of an image by entering the hexadecimal value or selecting a color from

the palette If you have uploaded a background image you can also clear this by selecting a background

color

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 17: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 17 -

4246 Stationery

Stationery is a background image your end-users can use to enhance their messages There are no limits

on the amount you may offer

We recommend using light colors and keeping the image size small for best results Also please keep in

mind that stationery images must be smaller than 100K

To add Stationery

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Enter the name of the image

3 Click Submit

42461 Stationery not available

An icon is not available in between the Background Color palette and the Emoticons

42462 Stationery available

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 18: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 18 -

The Stationery drop down is available once one has been uploaded with the name set from above

425 Rotating Banner Ad

A banner ad is a form of advertising which is embedded into your Web Mail service This banner will be

displayed on all of your Web Mail pages You may display your own banner or sell this space Also you can

display one banner or rotate multiple banners

The banner ad must be in HTML code with a maximum size of 468X60 In the Control Center you will find

an example which you may use when creating the HTML code Once you have created the HTML code

enter it into to the field provided

To add your Rotating Banner code

1 Go to the Manage Services page

2 Select Advance Option

3 Click on Rotate Banner Ad

4 Enter the code into the field provided

Note If you use a third party to sell your advertising space enter the script they gave you by copying and

pasting it into the field at the end of the page

To preview your Rotating Banner selections

1 Once you enter the HTML code for the banner or script for multiple banners you can view your

selections by clicking the Submit Preview button

2 A pop-up window will open and display your selections for review

3 Click on the Finish button to save your selections in the Control Center

To display one banner

1 Enter the HTML code of the banner and remember to include a HREF tag and an IMG SRC tag

Note The IMG SRC tag must refer to an image that is accessible through the Internet not on a local

drive For example

ltA HREF=httpwwwyourdomaincomgt

ltIMG SRC=httpwwwyourdomaincomimagesbannergifgtltAgt

To display multiple banners or rotate banners

1 Enter the ad rotation script as given to you by your advertising network or as you wrote it into the

HTML source code of your website pages

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 19: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 19 -

426 Sign up Link

Your end users have the option of signing up for their own email account under your domain You can easily enable and disable this feature as needed For private labelchannel service Everyonenet recommends not turning this feature on since you are paying a per mailbox fee

4261 High Risk

If you enable this feature users will be at a higher risk for spam scanning on the network To protect our network we can automatically lock accounts for services that have their sign-up link enabled due to spam reasons

427 Default Web Mail Preferences

You may modify the default settings for Web Mail When you create a new account the end users will have

these settings enabled Your end users may modify these preferences in Web Mail

Default Time Zone

Default Time Format

Default Date Format

Action to be taken after moving or deleting a message

Action to be taken after sending a message

Auto Save to Draft enable or disable

Auto Complete enable or disable

Forwarding Mode Attachment or Inline

Text Editor using rich or plain text editor

Chose the default Rich Text Editor (RTE) settings font and size

Webmail Interface enable or disable

Calendar FreeBusy enable or disable

NOTE Current users are unaffected by these changes End-users will need to manually change these

settings Only new users will inherit these defaults

428 Report Spam

When enabled the feature is indicated by this button in the rich web

However In favor of using this feature we ask that users wanting to report false negatives follow the process indicated here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=263amplang=en

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 20: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 20 -

1 Web Mail

a Save the message in a specified folder so we can review 2 Email Client

a The message is preferably needs to be saved as a EML file If not one of the other formats will work

b The message requires the full email header in order for us to process c If there are multiple messages they need to be put in a ZIP file

429 Quota Warning Letter

4291 Email Quota Warning Letter

You can notify your end users when their mailbox quotas are near capacity This email will be generated

automatically

4292 One_storage Quota Warning Letter

You can notify end-users when their one_storage service is near capacity This email will be generated automatically

4293 How to create quota warning letter

To create a quota warning letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 21: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 21 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4210 Welcome Letter

You can create a welcome email message that greets new end-users of your email service This will appear

as their first email message in their Inbox Please keep in mind that this message will go to all new end

users across all of your domains

To create a welcome letter

1 Enter the From address this must be an email address within your service

2 Enter the Subject

3 Enter your message

4 If sending the email in HTML format check the box next to Send email in HTML format

5 Click on Submit to save your changes

Note You can preview your letter by clicking on the Preview Letter link

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 22: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 22 -

It is important that you always SUBMIT after you are done

4211 Calendar

In this section you can enable or disable calendar for all of your new clients using this feature Select the

radio button next to enable or disable to set your preference

Note To enable Calendar for your client please select a client or end user offer with this feature

4212 Navigation Buttons

You can select or upload your own navigation buttons for the Web Mail interface We offer you a variety of

buttons style choices for any backgrounds Please keep in mind that this process may take several minutes

for the changes to appear This large logo will only be displayed when using the Classic Web Mail interface

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 23: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 23 -

42121 System buttons

To select a button style

1 Click on the radio button next to the style of your choice

2 Click Submit

42122 Customized buttons

To upload your own buttons

First ensure that your own buttons are 110X24 (width x height) pixel GIF images

1 Browse or enter the location of the image

2 Do the same for any additional buttons you will be changing

3 Click Submit

43 Email Rules

Under the Email Rules section you can manage the SpamShield settings and email delivery features for your domain

431 SpamShield Score

SpamShield is a spam fighting premium service that can automatically move unwanted mail to the Spam or Trash folder or reject the message This process is simple automatic and can be personalized SpamShield Lite offers general spam protection While SpamShield Pro includes advanced spam prevention features and customization which are not available on other spam blockers SpamShield assigns points to a message for suspicious indications of spam such as having ADV in the subject line and reduces points for characteristics of legitimate e-mail such as having a valid sender On an average a message with a cumulative SpamShield score greater than 3 is most likely an unwanted e-mail Based on test results SpamShield Pro should detect over 75 of unwanted e-mail with no false positives at the default level of 25

A score of 10 to 25 - Indicates that message is not likely to be spam

A score of 30 - Indicates that message is spam

A score of 35 to 50 - Messages are considered most likely to be spam

A score of 50 or higher ndash Messages are considered spam due to the originating IP RBLs and SURBLs

In the Control Center you can adjust the score which is applied by default to all of your end users Please

keep in mind that your end user settings in Web Mail will override this setting

To adjust the SpamShield Score setting

1 Log into your Control Center

2 Select Manage Services

3 Click on Email Rules

4 Select Spam Shield Score

5 Enable the filter by checking the box

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 24: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 24 -

6 Select the SpamShield Score from the drop down menu

7 Select the action to be taken from the drop down menu

8 Click OK to save your changes

432 Email Rules

Email Rules route messages to the designated folders and can be used to approve or block

messagessenders based on advanced criteria The only exception is for messages designated to go to the

INBOX A user rule can process the message afterwards to move a message into another folder once the

first condition to be in the INBOX has been met

Inbound Email Rules

Inbound Email Rules apply to all incoming messages and take precedence over user-defined Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules

Outbound Email Rules apply to all outgoing messages via Web Mail and SMTP services hosted by the

service

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 25: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 25 -

4321 To create a rule

1 From the Email Rules section select Inbound or Outbound Email Rules 2 Click on Create a New Rule or New Rule button 3 Name the rule (optional) 4 Select the Condition(s) of the rule 5 Select the Action(s) 6 Click on Save

4322 To edit a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to edit click the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4323 To enabledisable a rule

1 Edit the rule by clicking on the Edit icon (yellow notepad with a pencil) 2 Enter a check mark in the Disabled box (located in the upper right corner) 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

4324 To remove a rule

1 Next to the email rule you want to remove click the Remove icon (red icon with an X) 2 A box will pop up asking you to confirm that you want to remove the rule Click OK 3 Make the required changes then click the Save button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 26: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 26 -

433 ApprovedBlocked Senders

The Approved and Blocked Senders lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a complete email

address (eg senderexamplenet) or a domain (eg examplenet)

Entries entered into the approved senders list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered

to all of your end users While the blocked senders list will ban messages from the specified email address

or domain to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined

approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail

You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4331 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Senders 2 Enter the email address or domain name 3 Click the Add button 4 Click the Save Changes button

4332 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list 2 Click the Remove button 3 Click the Save Changes button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 27: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 27 -

434 ApprovedBlocked Networks

The Approved and Blocked Networks lists are email rules that will filter emails specified by a valid IPv4 address or network (in CIDR notation)

Entries entered into the approved networks list will allow all messages sent from that sender to be delivered to all of your end users While the blocked network list will ban messages from the specified valid IPv4 address or network to be delivered to any of your end users Each list takes precedence over the user-defined approvedblocked sender list in Web Mail You can have a total of 500 entries in each list

4341 To add an entry

1 From the Email Rules section select Approved or Blocked Networks

2 Enter the valid IPv4 address or network

3 Click the Add button

4 Click the Save Changes button

4342 To remove an entry

1 Select the entry from the list

2 Click the Remove button

3 Click the Save Changes button

435 Order of Rules

Here is the order in which the email rules process

1 Everyonenet spam filtering (this is not optional)

2 Approved Networks

3 Approved Senders

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 28: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 28 -

4 Blocked Networks

5 Blocked Senders

6 SpamShield Score

7 Email Rules

It is possible for a domain to reside in an approved network but the domain can be blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 29: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 29 -

5 Manage Users

The User Management section of the Mail Control Center allows you to administer your user base This is divided into two sections the user management and email specific functions User Management section This section provides a summary which contains the maximum users allowed You can also list your user accounts reserve login names and retrieve a demographics report Email-Specific Functions section Features such as create users send email manage email aliases and expire user passwords can be found in this section

51 List User Accounts

Search your user base using their last name first name or login name You may also use one of the many

quick search selections found under the Shortcuts menu

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 30: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 30 -

511 To search under first name last name or login name

1 Search for user information by entering the login name last name andor first name in the

appropriate fields

2 Click on the Submit button to retrieve the specified user information

512 To search using the shortcut menu

You may use one of the shortcuts on the List User Accounts page to get user information in a batch Please

keep in mind that these queries may take a long time to execute depending on the size of your user base

Once you click on the appropriate shortcut link the list of accounts you requested will appear at the bottom

of the page

Shortcuts are disabled if you have over 5000 users Your choices are

List reserved accounts ndash Reserved account are names which are used a place holders accounts to

prevent others from signing up for these names

List alias accounts ndash Alias accounts are forwarding accounts These accounts forward all mail sent

to the address to an email box or distribution list

List suspended users ndash A suspended account does not allow account access

List frozen users ndash Accounts may become frozen by the abuse team when the account has become

compromised andor has abused our terms of service

List all users ndash When you select this option all email accounts will be displayed

513 Manage User Accounts Results

When you have successfully conducted a search the results will be displayed in list format

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 31: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 31 -

514 Search user accounts

You can use filters to locate specific accounts that are suspended reserved alias restricted or frozen

To search using filters

1 On the List User Accounts result page select the criteria from the drop down menu

2 The page will refresh with the specified results

515 Edit a user account

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account information

3 Modify the end user information

4 Click on Save to submit your changes

516 Change a user password

1 On the List User Accounts result page you will find a link called Regular located under the Account

Type column

2 Click on the Regular link to edit the user account password

3 Set the new password

a See the create user section for the password policy

b In addition we also now show the last time the password was updated next to this text

field

4 Confirm the new password

5 Click on Save to submit your changes

Note First and Last Name are required fields Please ensure you have entered this information before

submitting your changes

517 Delete a user

To delete a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Delete button

Note Users can now be recovered using the Recover Users function if it was deleted in the past 7 days

Please see this function Beyond 7 days the user is no longer recoverable

518 Suspend a user

As an administrator you can suspend user accounts when necessary When you suspend a user they will

no longer have access to web login POP IMAP SMTP or other one_business applications Also any

email sent to the email account will not be delivered and the sender will receive an undeliverable notification

response Upgraded Publisher Mail accounts such as Mail Plus cannot be suspended Please contact

Everyonenet support if you wish to suspend an upgraded account

To suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Suspend button

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 32: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 32 -

519 Un-suspend a user

5191 To un-suspend a user

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on the Un-suspend button

5192 Unable to un-suspend a user

In some cases end users may become suspended by the Everyonenet abuse team due to a violation of the

terms of service These users can only be un-suspended by Everyonenet and are denoted by a restricted

or frozen status Please contact support to request that the user be un-suspended

5110 Restricted User

A user with a restricted status indicated that Everyonenet locked the user account Please contact support

for more information in regards to this userrsquos restriction

5111 Restoring Deleted User

Users deleted from the Everyonenet system can be recreated at any time Users can be recreated and restored to the previous state prior to its deletion if done within 7 days of deletion There are 2 methods for restoring a user

51111 Using the Create User function

Please denote the two important factors when recreating a user for a full restoration

Same username (data from an account is based on the username)

The user was deleted in the past 7 days If you do not meet these 2 requirements the deleted user may not be restored When restoring a user follow the create user process Make sure the username is the one you are want to restore You will be prompted as below

If you chose the option to recover you will be given this next option to choose recovery date (We have seen admins deletecreate multiple times in a small time frame and the restore points have been added to identify when the user was exactly deleted)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 33: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 33 -

Upon selecting the recovery time the user will be confirmed recreated and be restored to the status it was prior to its deletion

51112 Recover Users option

See the section below regarding this feature

5112 Blocked User

This feature view was added to the Everyonenet services in 2012 User blocking for messages caught as

spam has been part of the Everyonenet service features for quite some time Due to large scale spamming

we have had the need to increase our performance measures by blocking accounts

Blocking ndash Userrsquos is prohibited from sending email They can receive but not send (from web mail or SMTP)

Due to the large number of false positive (FP) messages users were getting blocked at a high rate For FP

reporting please use the methods outlined here httphelpdeskeveryonenetkbcgiview=265amplang=en

Although the false negatives (FN) are not higher in comparison to the volume of regular email they have a

very negative affect against our IPrsquos hence we get blacklisted Everyonenet needs a method to

automatically stop an account from sending email and stops the account from sending at all if we find it

abusing our network or will potentially cause our other user base harm Our IPrsquos getting blacklisted is one of

the largest issues we face

Current limitation and Support

Currently admins can only lsquoUn-Blockrsquo a user twice in a lifetime There is an RFE open to change this in the

future but if you reach a limit for performing a lsquoUn-Blockrsquo you will need to contact support to have this

examined

Control Center Updates

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 34: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 34 -

Due to the excessive number of FPrsquos being reported and users getting blocked we have given more

information to the admins on messages users are attempting to send We have updated a few parts of the

List User accounts section

Under 5000 users

As normal we allow user bases under 5000 the ability to review all users by the shortcutrsquos menu

You can simply look at your blocked users through this link

Over 5000 users

You will need to search by the log-in name (username)

New Information

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 35: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 35 -

We have added 1 new column Blocked Date The Status column has been updated that will also give more

information

NOTE Once you unblock a user the status history and abuse history becomes unavailable for you to view

Please do the needful on your end by viewing this data first before unblocking the user

Status

This column previously served to give the userrsquos status either blank or other previous statuses of

suspended locked etc The lsquorsquo still serves of getting the exact date of when this status occurred However

we have added a status history that gives an audit history of what has occurred on the account and how

many times the account was blocked

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 36: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 36 -

Blocked Date

The time given here matches the time displayed as the lsquorsquo character in the Status column What is more

important is the ldquoabuse historyrdquo Once opened there may be multiple entries We only display the 100 most

recent entries for up to two weeks If the entry is older than 2 weeks it is removed from display

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 37: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 37 -

When you ldquoView Messagerdquo this is the raw version of the email

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 38: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 38 -

Depending on how the person formatted the email some information may be false ie the FROM address

We do track the IP they are connection from if you would like to trace this yourself The body of the

message would be the last part of the raw message information

For your viewing you can download the lsquoRaw Messagersquo This is best viewed in Outlook Express if there is

too much HTML

Unblocking User

To unblock a user please follow these steps in this order

From the drop-down menu select lsquoUn-Blockrsquo

Do this one first We have an outstanding RFE to change this order as the default drop down selection is to

DELETE a user

Select the check box next to the username

If doing all on the page the box at the top can be checked

Press the lsquoGorsquo button

52 Create Users

521 To create a single user account

1 From Manage Users select Create User Account 2 Enter the end user information into all the fields Please keep in mind that all fields are required 3 Passwords must be at least adhere to the 2012 password policy

a Minimum 8 character length b Maximum 20 characters length c Contain at least one numeric [0 ndash 9] character d Contain at least one upper-case character e Contain at least one lower-case character

f Contain at least one special character from $^amp()~`-=_+[]|ltgt

g Cannot match the username or email address 4 As a one_business account you have the option to add the user information into Shared Address

Book Please check this box if you wish to add the end user to your Shared Address Book 5 Click Submit

522 Batch Process

Some admins are given the functionality to bulk upload users Please see the below section on batch processing if it is available Otherwise the admin may have to do this for this domain owner

53 Recover users

The recover userrsquos option is easier to use Upon going to the page you will be prompted with the deleted user(s)

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 39: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 39 -

Select the user then press the recover button

You can only recover 1 user at a time If you have multiple users you can recover again You will be notified after each user has been recreated per the notes on the page

54 Send Email to all users

As the administrator you may send email to all of your users using the Send Mail feature This will send

email to all mailboxes on your domain The recipients will not be able to access or reply to the mailing

To send a mass email to your users

1 Select Manage Users

2 Click on Send Mail

3 Enter the From email address This must be an email address within the same domain

4 Enter the Subject

5 Enter your message Only messages with ASCII characters will be sent Any use of non-ASCII

characters in any field will cause delivery to fail

6 If you wish to send the message in HTML format please check the box marked ldquoSend email in

HTML formatrdquo

7 Click on Preview if you would like to see your message before sending

8 Click on Send when you are ready to send your message

Note Your users can opt-in to be contacted in the Options section of their mailbox

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 40: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 40 -

55 Manage Email Aliases

An Email Alias is an email address which forwards all mail sent to the address to one or more email

addresses The email alias can point to a group of email addresses or a single email address This is not

an email box and is considered a forwarding account only thus email cannot be sent from nor received

using an email alias

551 Create a New Email Alias

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the Create A New Email Alias link

3 Enter the alias name which will be the new email address to receive email

4 As a one_business account you can add the new alias to the Shared Address Book at this time

Please enter the Shared Address Book name for the alias

5 Enter the distribution list This is the address(es) any email sent to the alias will be forwarded to

Multiple addresses must be separated by commas

6 Click Submit

552 ListEditDelete Aliases

5521 To list email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

5522 To edit email aliases

You may only edit the distribution list

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Click on the Edit link located under the Edit column for the account

4 Modify the distribution list

5 Click on Submit

NOTE Make sure that aliases are not left blank There is a bug that at times will allow you to save a blank

alias This will cause problems when you try to edit this alias later on It will be easier to delete the alias

5523 To delete email aliases

1 From the Manage Users page select Manage Email Aliases

2 Click on the ListEditDelete Aliases link

3 Select the account(s) to delete by checking the box under the Delete column next

4 Click Submit

Note Deletion of an alias account is permanent and cannot be undone or recovered

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 41: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 41 -

553 Alias Administrator Email Address

Per issues regarding spam and how aliases are handled we have a feature that allows bounced messages from invalid recipients of an alias to go back to an administrator address On this level it would be someone in your organization

56 Require use of SSL

The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message

transmission on the Internet To enhance security you may require all of your users to use 128-bit SSL

Transport Layer Security By default SSL is enabled as optional

561 To enable SSL as required

1 From the Mange Users page select Require user of SSL

2 Select one of six options

a Optional ndash not required but users will use a co-branded SSL service on the Everyonenet

system

b Required for entire IMAP POP and SMTP session Web login only ndash The SSL ports are

mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and web mail is the co-branded log-in page only

c Required for entire IMAP POP SMTP and web session (Web users may see web

browser security warnings) ndash The SSL ports are mandatory on POPIMAPSMTP and the

entire web mail session uses the co-branded Everyonenet domain for web mail

d Secure session is optional ((non-ssl login stays non-ssl ssl login stays ssl) ndash If the users

log-in using secure then their entire session is secure using the co-branded Everyonenet

domain

e Secure session required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and the entire session is maintained in this

manner

f Secure login required for webmail only ndash The web mail log-in page defaults to the

Everyonenet co-branded domain for log-in and returns to the standard domain for the

web mail session

3 Click on Submit

57 Expire User Passwords

To enhance security as the administrator you may expire your users passwords on a regular schedule or

immediately Users with expired passwords are required to change their password via the web interface in

order to access email and other services again

Note In order to facilitate the password change we recommend sending notification to your users In

addition all passwords must adhere to our current password policy as described in an earlier section

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 42: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 42 -

571 Expire User Passwords

From the Control Center setting you can expire passwords in the future From the description a notification will be sent out Note If you have requested to Everyonenet that end-users not be notified this setting may not work The setting will adhere to the time period you set in the drop down selection from the current date

30 days

60 days

90 days

180 days

1 year Once the selection is made please remember to save your setting for this to be enabled

572 Expire Users Passwords Now

We implemented an option for you to enforce a password expire right away Once this is done users will be

forced to update their passwords This should be used with great care as Everyonenet support cannot

undo this setting

573 To change expired passwords

1 Go to the web login page and attempt to login using the expired password

2 You will be prompted to change your password at this time

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 43: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 43 -

58 Batch Process Accounts

This feature is similar to the administrative function of adding in users but also needs to be requested to be enabled This is only if the admin wants to batch create users often NOTE We highly recommend that the admin do this at the top level so the validation steps can be done The feature here has not validation and the domain admin is left to validate their own file and fix errors

581 Import

The primary function of this tool is to upload domains and users

5811 Domains

Please check the import file format for domains Domains must be created first before nay users can be created

5812 Users

If you have followed the steps in the validation section importing the users will not be an issue

582 Update Passwords

As an admin you can mass update user passwords We do not recommend using this feature unless you want to make your user base change their passwords

583 Deleting Users

If you decide to delete a user after batch processing you cannot immediately run the batch process again in hopes to re-import Users deleted will fall under our standard user deletion policy and can still be recovered through the Control Center for that domain The user will need to be manually created and cannot be batched This is important to ensure you make sure you have the data validated before batch processing

584 Do not encrypt passwords

Although we do not recommend using this at times it is used for migration purposes As part of a compliance feature we encrypt all our passwords If a user updates their password it will be encrypted

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 44: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 44 -

59 Calendar sharing management tool one_sync

591 Using one_sync

The one_sync service is a downloadable file that currently only functions with Outlook 2003 and 2007 For tutorial and how torsquos we do have a guide on how to use and set-up one_sync here httpwwweveryonenetpdfOneSync_Bookpdf In addition we have a video on the basics of using one_sync found here httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guidesone_syncUsing20One20Synchtml

592 Control Center function

From the the Control Center you may designate calendar admins (Per the notation usernames only)

An admin may view all calendars from their web mail andor Outlook from within the domain

510 Mobile device service one_mobile

5101 Functionality

The one_mobile service is an integrated product feature that does not use the IMAPPOPSMTP protocols It is an Exchange based mobile set-up feature This is a push feature that allows you to sync these items from your one_mail service

Mail

Contacts

Calendar Please look here for currently supported devices and configuration set-up httpwwweveryonenetpdfone_mobile_v13_channelpdf

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 45: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 45 -

5102 Control Center function

The Control Center allows a certain level of security for a mobile device and how it can interact with an end-user The main function is doing a self-service remote wipe

Important note Using the WIPE feature will reset your mobile device completely

51021 Self-Service

This function is admin set to allow end-users to wipe their own mobile device By setting the ldquoAllowrdquo an end-user will have the option in the one_mail service to perform the wipe function If this is not allowed the admin has complete control of performing a remote wipe via the Control Center

51022 Remote Wipe

Per the above note and the note presented on the Control Center Doing so removes all data and configuration information from the device then the device is securely erased to original factory settings

1 Start the wipe by finding the username of the account

2 When looked up all devices set-up as one_mobile will be displayed as synced 3 Select the device to wipe then press the wipe button

4 A pop-up will occur indicating to confirm the action to continue Once you start this cannot be

undone

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 46: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 46 -

5 Once your mobile device connects to the internet it will perform the wipe and your device will be completely reset

6 If the same device is used the wipe status is removed once the device successfully reconnects

Per above statements once a wipe has been processed it cannot be undone The mobile device will need

to be restored using whatever functions available to restore the device in addition to reconfiguring where

needed

5103 Server Name

An important note here is that the one_mobile feature ONLY functions using the server name one-mobilenet This service is currently not white labeled

511 User Alerts

This feature is an automated notification to a single email address You simply enable the alert and set the email address Any users that are blocked can have a notification sent to an admin address to be alerted prior to the customer asking about it

5111 Setting the Alert

Alerts are now set when an admin suspends a user or an account is blocked from sending email In addition an additional optional setting is to denote if a user changes their password Checking at least one box is essential for enabling this alert

Once checked you will be prompted to enter an email address NOTE As previously indicated this will only take a single email address

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 47: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 47 -

Once the address is entered and submitted you will be notified indicating the setting has been updated

5112 Disabling the alert

If you no longer want to receive such alerts simply uncheck the box(es) and submit This will disable the notifications

5113 Notify more than one person

Per this feature you can only have a single email address in this alert The solution here is to create an email alias The email alias will be the address you send to You can then modify the alias itself to addremove people

512 Reserve Login Name

A reserved login name is a place holder account to set aside the login name for future use or to prevent

others from signing up for these names You will not be able to use reserved accounts as regular email

accounts Thus email messages will not be delivered to reserved login names The service does not have a

limit as to the number of reserve accounts you can create

To create a Reserve Login Name

1 On the User Management section select Reserve Login Name

2 Fill in the Login Name(s) field You may enter multiple login names separated by a comma

3 Click on Submit

To delete a Reserve Login Name

1 On the List User Accounts result page check the box next to the last name of the user

2 Click on Delete

6 Account Summary

The account summary section is restricted and no information here has any reflection to this domain In addition another access level is required

The information here is only pertinent to the admin

7 Frequently Asked Questions and Support

Below you will find some answers to the most frequently asked questions

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 48: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 48 -

71 Support

711 On-line Information

You will find a lot of useful information in our knowledgebase which will help you to support your end users httpwwweveryonenetsupportonline_guideshtml httphelpdeskeveryonenet

In addition for any global issues we see we update our Service Status page on current events located at httpwwweveryonenetmainscriptsstatuscgi

712 Contacting Support

You will need to contact your admin of your domainhost for support They will provide you with their contact information

72 Increasing the storage capacity

The storage capacity can be easily changed for one or all of your end users You can update an entire

domain or individual users

721 Domain level

This update needs to be done at the admin level All end-users will then have the new offer assigned along with all the other features

722 User level

This requires the admin to give access to log-in as a password is required when trying to ldquoeditrdquo a user from the manage users section

NOTE Only the site admin has the necessary information Once access is gained the admin needs to select the new offer similar to when a domain is created Once selected and submitted the user will have the new offer and features

73 Changing the Web Mail Address

731 Initial Set-up

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new Web Mail URL and

ensure that the CNAME record has been created

732 Mistake made

If a mistake was made do not delete the domain at the admin level Please contact your support team to assist in fixing the issue

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support

Page 49: For Domain Administrators of Distributors - Email …4.2.3.4 Create your outgoing email promotional signature You can create an email promotional signature that will be appended to

Mail Control Center User Guide

copy 2013 Mail Control Center - 49 -

74 Changing Email Address

Your Web Mail Address (URL) entry is created when you setup the service If you decide to use a different

URL for Web Mail you may do so by contacting support Please include your new domain Web Mail URL

and ensure that the MX and CNAME record have been created

75 Batch Process Accounts

The service includes a batch upload process which provisions large number of email addresses for the

domain For further information please contact support